2016 Chrysler 300 Owner`s Manual

2016 Chrysler 300 Owner`s Manual
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
300
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .26 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .59
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
ON/RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
Replacement Keys
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program2. This device must accept any interference received,
ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
including interference that may cause undesired opKey Fob is one that has never been programmed.
eration.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
dealer.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
General Information
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will proThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Rearming Of The System
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
further information).
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
To Arm The System
(RKE) transmitter.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
3. If any doors are open, close them.
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previEntry (RKE) transmitter.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
information.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
NOTE:
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
NOTE:
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Security System Manual Override
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
doors or open any door.
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
outside mirrors (if equipped).
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the Sound Horn With Lock
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
Headlight Illumination On Approach
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles To Unlatch The Trunk
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setPush the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
To Lock The Doors
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless performed at an authorized dealer.
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Transmitter Battery Replacement
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
(24 km/h) or greater.
battery.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Using The Panic Alarm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
2
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
Emergency Key Removal
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two • A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
halves together.
the battery is a minimum of three years.
General Information
• Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
2. This device must accept any interference received,
maintaining security. The system has a range of
including interference that may cause undesired opapproximately
300 ft (91 m).
eration.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
•
may reduce this range.
•
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Vehicle in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
RKE panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle security alarm not active
Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
in the Remote Start mode.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before push and release the START/STOP button.
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterTo Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
N-Go feature, the message “Remote start active - Push
start button” will display in the Driver Information
Display (DID) until you push the START button.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
Cancel Remote Start
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START occur:
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
Start request.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
Door Lock Knob
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
If
the
door
lock
knob
is down when you shut the door,
upward.
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
Power Door Lock Switch
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enTo provide a safer environment for small children riding
abled.
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
PARK.
Door Lock System
3. The driver door is opened.
1. Open the rear door.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
further information.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
door is unlocked.
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
search in any passive entry vehicle.
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter while a door is ajar.
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is ajar.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
the door is ajar.
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Transmitter In Vehicle
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
2
• The doors are locked manually using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
To Enter The Trunk
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit(1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
of CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Light), which is
deck lid.
located on the deck lid.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
WINDOWS
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait Power Windows
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to door windows.
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Power Window Switches
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in AUTO-Down Feature
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inThe driver door power window switch and some model
formation.
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second
WARNING!
detent, release, and the window will go down automatiNever leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do cally.
not let children play with power windows. Do not To open the window part way, push the window switch
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a to the first detent and release it when you want the
location accessible to children, and do not leave the window to stop.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
To stop the window from going all the way down during • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autothe AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
Reset Auto-Up
the first detent and release it when you want the window
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
to stop.
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
NOTE:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
switch again to close the window.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if
equipped). To disable the window controls and the rear
sunscreen, push and release the window lockout button
(setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window
controls and the rear sunscreen, push and release the
window lockout button again (setting it in the UP
position).
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
2
Trunk Release
Button
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pushing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds or by
using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open Trunk Emergency Release
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information on of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can
be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attrunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
tached to the trunk latching mechanism.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
Some of the most important safety features in your
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
vehicle are the restraint systems:
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
• Seat Belt Systems
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
• Child Restraints
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilImportant Safety Precautions
dren who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
Please pay close attention to the information in this
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
possible.
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
Seat Belt Systems
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
be belted at all times.
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccuDriver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
pied.
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when- vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unposition.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
Initial Indication
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermit- has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authobelts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu- rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Positioning The Lap Belt
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortThe folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
the latch plate.
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm .
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags
system components:
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Air Bag Warning Light
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Instrument Panel
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Knee Impact Bolsters
the air bag covers.
• Advanced Front Air Bags
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
WARNING!
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air
sensors or other system components.
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
Knee Impact Bolsters
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Supplemental Side Air Bags
Air Bags.
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
Rollover Events
If A Deployment Occurs
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. or all of the following may occur:
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have detion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by bags will not be in place to protect you.
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
WARNING!
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the System serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or NOTE:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
but they will open during air bag deployment.
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
structions for cleaning.
authorized dealer immediately.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
In the event of an impact, if the communication network Procedure
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
tem perform the following functions:
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or and starting the engine.
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
Air Bag Warning Light
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
button.
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
the battery has power.
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
• Unlock the power door locks.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
eight-second interval.
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malremains on while driving.
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
again after initial startup.
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncsystem immediately.
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
which could affect the Supplemental Restraint
System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
vehicle or the EDR.
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For
additional
information,
refer
to
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–732–8243.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canaseat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
da’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetyinstructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
index-53.htm
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Center position only may be removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
2
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
in any direction.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
ing position.
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
turer’s instructions.
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes
Yes
No
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact
Center Only may be removed.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Tether Strap Mounting
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
A — Tether Strap Hook
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 1 — Cover
B — Tether Anchor
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 3 — Attaching Strap
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING!
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
system.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
The light should come on and remain on for
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects should be located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .119
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .116
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .150
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .137
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .144
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL). . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .157
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .158 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .168
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .169
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .161 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .186
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .191
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .178
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .179
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .192
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .195
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .206
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .223
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .225
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .208 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .230
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .232
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .233
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .243
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .237
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .243
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
䡵 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .245
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .255
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Power Sunshade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .261
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned a 9-1-1 button.
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
operator:
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• The vehicle brand.
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
9-1-1 Call
Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
additional help is needed.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
(Continued)
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congesantennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) or
tion.
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
• Weather.
Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to
function properly.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
lane next to your vehicle.
forward, full rearward and normal.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight
LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s in front of the doors.
side when equipped with turn signal and approach
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
lighting.
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
will move slightly downward from the present position
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select to the normal driving position.
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to will automatically unfold.
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
Vehicle” for further information.
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located Your Vehicle” for further information.
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.
Slide-On-Rod Feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
3
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
BSM Warning Light
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 m.p.h. (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
of less than 15 m.p.h. (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 m.p.h.
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING! (Continued)
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is
equipped with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use
your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system.
It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrutime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
ment Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
WARNING!
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Blind Spot Alert Off
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the switches is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use these switches to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
1 — Seat Control
Power Seat Switches
2 — Seatback Control — (If Equipped)
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
Power Lumbar Switch
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
Heated
Seats
—
If Equipped
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar On some models, the front and rear seats may be
support.
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated Front Heated Seats
using the Uconnect System.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause serious burns
due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Rear Heated Seats
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
that allow the rear
are two heated seat switches
passengers to operate the seats independently.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will autoYou can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minindicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in utes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatiLO and none for OFF.
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
once to select HI-level
• Push the heated seat button
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
heating.
• Push the heated seat button
LO-level heating.
a second time to select Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
the heating elements OFF.
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
screen.
Head Restraints
once to choose HI. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
• Press the ventilated seat button
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a second time to by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
a third time to
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
push downward on the head restraint.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
head and the RHR.
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
3
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the center
rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
Folded Rear Seatback
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
Memory Seat Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
switch.
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followmemory buttons (1) or (2). The Driver Information ing:
Display (DID) will display which memory position 1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
has been set.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
the system to complete the memory recall before
memory profile.
continuing to Step 3.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, Memory Position Recall
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release in PARK, a message will display in the DID (if equipped).
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory MEMORY button number (1) on the driver’s door or the
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
cluster.
memory position 1.
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans- To recall the memory setting for driver two, push
mitter within 10 seconds.
MEMORY button number (2) on the driver’s door or the
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and memory position 2.
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
button on the RKE transmitter.
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
vehicle.
Entry and Easy Exit position.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Feamm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
further information.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
position.
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Latch
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the the open position.
center front edge of the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Headlight Switch
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
Parking Lights
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light opto turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all
eration.
instrument panel lighting.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by delay.
this feature.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turn off in the normal manner.
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to NOTE:
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further • The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
information.
feature.
Headlight Time Delay
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Unfor up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforvehicle in an unlit area.
mation.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.
NOTE:
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
To Deactivate
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when
the vehicle is moving forward.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
operation of low beams).
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the information.
system.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when the
Headlights — If Equipped
engine starts, headlights are off, and the parking brake is
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
off. The headlight switch must be used for normal
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
nighttime driving.
the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
NOTE:
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on, be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
sequence of rotations.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
Multifunction Lever
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Turn Signals
steering column.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Lane Change Assist
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Driver the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
Flash-To-Pass
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overpushed.
head console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
3
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilsecond time.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Interior Lights
Dimmer Controls
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
3
Dimmer Controls
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Dome Light Position
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Mist Feature
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
continue to operate until you release the multifunction and then turn off.
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper Automatic Headlights Only)
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Rain Sensing Wipers
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
when ice or dried salt water is present on the windnot operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the automatic transmission gear selector is in
shield.
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
may reduce rain sensor performance.
multifunction lever is moved or the gear selector is
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
following conditions:
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
previously) exist.
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
steering column switch is located below the multifuncpull the switch toward you or push the switch away from
tion lever on the steering column.
you as desired.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
130 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
ment Panel” for further information.
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
WARNING!
seat position. If your vehicle is equipped with this
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin feature, it will allow you to adjust the brake and accelbecause of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, erator pedals toward or away from the driver to provide
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- improved position with the steering wheel.
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if cushion side shield.
used for long periods.
(Continued)
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted
when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
information.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the Metric Speed (km/h)
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. Speed (mph)
continue to increase until the button is released, then
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
the new set speed will be established.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the To Decrease Speed
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
To Accelerate For Passing
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
U.S. Speed (mph)
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
vehicle set speed.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
the new set speed will be established.
moderate hills is normal.
Metric Speed (km/h)
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Control.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
appropriate distance between vehicles.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
WARNING! (Continued)
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
To Activate/Deactivate
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
“ACC Ready.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do • The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the • Driver door is opened at low speeds.
accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
To Cancel
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
The following conditions cancel the system:
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
• The brake pedal is applied.
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To Turn Off
NOTE:
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
memory if:
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
• The ignition is turned off.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
WARNING!
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
in the DID.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET - button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
flected in the DID.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
NOTE:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
of the vehicle.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
Metric Speed (km/h)
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the DID is a warning for
capacity.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vethis moment.
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
passing on the left hand side.
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver interACC Operation At Stop
vention will be required at this moment.
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
WARNING!
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
need for any driver action.
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two these warnings can result in a collision and death or
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC serious personal injury.
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
Overtake Aid
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The ACC SET
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ instrument cluster.
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
the following displays in the DID:
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is imporThe “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterDoing so could cause an ACC system failure or
market grille or modifying the grille is not recommalfunction.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it.
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailtemporarily occur.
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC funcexamine the windshield and the camera located on the tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
3
Lane Changing Example
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the Metric Speed (km/h)
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. Speed (mph)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the DID display.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
flected in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The CANCEL button is pushed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the DID display.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
heated).
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
Drive position.
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button Operation
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
20 mph (32 km/h).
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
To Turn Off
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
memory if:
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mitigate the potential collision.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. the brakes.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph
FCW Message
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle. vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect display.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
in front of you.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
avoid a possible collision.
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
return to its full performance state. If the problem perdriver after ignition shut down.
sists, see your authorized dealer.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
Service FCW Warning
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
higher rate of speed.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
screens.
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
FCW Limited Warning
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
shield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits LaneSense Operation
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
NOTE:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
below the Uconnect display.
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the
visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
Left
Lane
Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Changing LaneSense Status
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The LaneSense system settings can be configured • The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
through the Uconnect system screen.
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
forward collision warning, etc.)
1. Push the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
IF EQUIPPED
2. Push the “Settings” button.
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
3. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
audible indications of the distance between the rear
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person- Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
alization settings.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph changed to the ON/RUN position.
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
NOTE:
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer ParkSense Sensors
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is Instrument Panel” for further information.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
direction, depending on the location, type and orientafascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detion of the obstacle.
tected obstacle. Refer to “Driver Information Display
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ (DID)” for further information.
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the DID will display the
park assist ready system status.
3
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Greater than
79 in (200
cm)
None
79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
None
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
None
6th Solid
None
None
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
None
None
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
None
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
5th
Solid
None
4th Solid
None
3rd Flashing
None
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
Front Park Assist
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
No Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
No
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obtion.
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume system is disabled, the DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
settings will not be accessible from the DID.
in REVERSE.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
through ignition cycles.
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the will be ON.
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
Uconnect display.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to dis- detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
able the system, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Driver SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
Information Display (DID)” for further information. FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILWhen the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and the system has detected a faulted condition, the
Driver Information Display (DID) will display a
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car
graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These
arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object
is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Driver Information
Display (DID)” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the DID, see an authorized
dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibraproperly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen ⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed last touchscreen appears again.
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
After five seconds this note will disappear.
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro- position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
grammable modes of operation that may be selected that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set- vehicle.
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
further information.
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
3
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is
located above the center button.
Overhead Console HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink For programming garage door openers that were manubuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
indicator flashes.
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1.
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
2.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
3.
activates, programming is complete.
Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the before 1995.
channels.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to (Non-Rolling Code)
program while you push and hold the hand-held To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
transmitter button.
follow these steps:
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Rerelease the button.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
in view.
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indito pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
fully trained.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door or gate motor.
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programrelease the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
follow all remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
NOTE:
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
programming, plug it back in at this time.
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, any time.
follow these steps:
Security
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all call toll-free 800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
WARNING!
3
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
2. This device must accept any interference that may be The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left
received including interference that may cause unde- between the sun visors on the overhead console.
sired operation.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
WARNING! (Continued)
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatithe sunroof.
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Opening Power Shade — Express
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
held rearward again.
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
Closing Sunroof — Express
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half switch a second time from the halfway position and the
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any shade will automatically open to the full open position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
During Express Open operation, any movement of the movement of the switch will stop the shade.
shade switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
completely.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
rearward again.
again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half secsecond and the shade will close automatically from any
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any Wind Buffeting
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occuropening to the Vent position.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Pinch Protect Feature
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the minimize the buffeting or open any window.
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucSunroof Maintenance
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
release to Express Close.
the glass panel.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
with a “key” are powered when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
“battery” are connected directly to the battery and powapproximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
ered at all times.
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition OFF Operation
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the • All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instruvehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
ment Panel” for further information.
discharge.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (10 The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be used on the center stack of the instrument panel.
to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
Center Console Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts (10 Amps). If the
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
3
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet /
Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console Power Outlet / Media Hub
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered
all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN”
to “B+”. Refer to “Rear Power Distribution Center
Cover” in “Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)”.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
3
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Retractable Cover
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Cupholders
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Push the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled push the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Push the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
push the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
warm beverages warm and cool beverages cool.
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the “Hot” position.
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
3
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
Rear Seat Cupholders
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
STORAGE
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with Glove Compartment
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
of the instrument panel.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Glove Compartment
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Console Features
There is a cubby bin located forward of the gear selector.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated
door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door
a second time to close it.
3
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the center console armrest.
Center Console
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items and handheld devices. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
like tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power outlet,
USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Upper Storage Tray
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Door Storage
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
The door panels contain storage areas.
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Front Door Trim Storage
Rear Armrest Storage
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The
trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from
mud, snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Net
The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net.
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs
(22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
Rear Cargo Net
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
push the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is
placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade
that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the
through the rear windshield.
fully raised position after a brief delay.
The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
System.
out along with the rear passenger window controls from
Push the “Controls” button and then push the “Rear the driver switch window lockout switch.
Sunshade” button to raise the power sunscreen. Push the
“Sunshade” button a second time to lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers
in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located
on the back of the center console between the heated seat
switches. Push the switch once to raise the sunshade.
Push the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
Power Sunshade Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .269 䡵 Uconnect SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .296
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .325
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .327
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE — IF E
QUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .329
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .337
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .358
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet
7 — Glove Compartment
2 — Driver Information Display (DID) Con- 8 — Uconnect System Hard Controls
trols
3 — Instrument Cluster
9 — Switch Bank
4 — Speed Controls
10 — Climate Control Hard Controls
5 — Uconnect System
11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
6 — Analog Clock
12 — Trunk Release Button
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Adaptive Cruise Control
15 —Uconnect Phone Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
Premium Instrument Cluster
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
5. Temperature Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem(RPM x 1000).
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temshows the Driver Information Display (DID) mesperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furallowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
ther information.
operating range.
3. Speedometer
CAUTION!
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
points to the side of the
The fuel pump symbol
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is
at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the AntiLock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light
will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
the brake fluid level checked.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster, this indicator will display in the DID. Refer to
”Driver Information Display (DID) — If Equipped” for further information.
4
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. This light illuminates when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop them vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Rear Fog Light Indicator
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rear Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction modes is set to
Sport, Track or Full OFF.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
In any situation in which the message on the display is ⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to
refer to the contents of the ⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly complying with the indications that you find there.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
those tires.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
low tire pressure telltale.
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to approximately one minute and then remain continuously
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsereduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a
single chime will sound.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the collision. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact you authorized dealership.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when
the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system is ON and both of the lane markings have not been
detected, the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
• When the LaneSense system is ON and both of the lane markings have been detected,
the LaneSense indicator is solid green.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Light
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
• Vehicle Info
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an inter- •
active display which is located in the instrument cluster.
•
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow •
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The •
DID Menu Items consists of the following:
•
• Speedometer
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
Messages
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• Screen Setup
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to
cycles through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons
allows you to cycles through the submenu
items of the Main menu item.
DID Controls
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Within each submenu layer, the up/down arrows will
allow the user to select the item of interest.
• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons will loop the user through the currently selected • Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
menu or options presented on the screen.
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the 1st page of the submenu).
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous
scrolling.
• Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each submenu layer and return to the main menu.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be dis- For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perforplayed.
mance Timers):
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus. indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
OFF/LOCK position.
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
driving style.
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
following procedure.
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
driving style.
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
procedure(s):
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
DID Selectable Menu Items
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.” the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
the ”Oil Life” screen.
Speedometer
4. Push and hold the OK button to rest oil life. If Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display and km/h.
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
popup message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off Vehicle Info
with ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for 5 seconds), The Vehicle Info consists of the following sub menu:
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
• Tire Pressure Monitor
5. Push and release the DOWN or UP arrow button to
• Coolant Temp
exit the submenu screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
• Trans Temp
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Oil Temp
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• Battery Voltage
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
• AWD Status — If Equipped
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The ACC SET
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC LaneSense — If Equipped
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
• Distance Setting Change
The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status. Push the LaneSense button (located on the
• System Cancel
center stack below the Uconnect display) until one of the
• Driver Override
following displays in the DID:
• System Off
• LaneSense Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• When LaneSense is deactivated, the display will read
“LaneSense Off.”
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• Lane Sense On
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
• When LaneSense is activated, the display will read
“LaneSense On.”
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Understanding
Vehicle” for further information.
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID. the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value diswill display the following:
played and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) • Distance
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
• Average Fuel Economy
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Elapsed Time
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
particular engine requirements
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber Audio
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information. the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
6. Fuel Gauge
• Standard (default)
• Detailed
7. Defaults
• Ok
• Cancel
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
Uconnect SETTINGS
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
panel, push and hold the button until the setting is the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
correct.
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Setting The Analog Clock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Personal Data and System Information.
Uconnect Touchscreen.
NOTE:
Buttons On The Touchscreen
CAUTION!
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can
result in damage to the touchscreen.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
down through the available settings.
⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
• Display Mode
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re- NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
lease the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen. Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
⬙parade⬙ positions.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with • Set Theme
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
When in this display, you may select the theme for the
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
display screen. Changing the theme will modify the
background image, highlight color, and button highlight
of the display screen.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Language
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Units
• Temperature
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Speed
• Voice Response Length
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
• Show Command List
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List
• Pressure
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se- buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
lected.
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
following settings will be available:
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
This feature will allow you to automatically have the down.
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
• Time Format
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that This feature will allow you to select the time format
setting has been selected.
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
• Set Time Hours
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to button. For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Of Your Vehicle”.
Safety & Driving Assistance
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
able:
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a checkNear. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
means the system will warn you of a possible collision had been selected. For further information, refer to
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
Vehicle”.
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to • Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
zone start point.
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steer(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve- ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide
hicle”.
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the a balance of steering feel and steering effort.
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures. • Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable”
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• ParkSense — If Equipped
indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
will retain its last known configuration state through
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
ignition cycles.
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It • Rear ParkSense Volume
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be sethe proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled lected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec“Sound and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in tion, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on the
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys- touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
tem function and operating information.
indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense
• Front ParkSense Volume
The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect System. The chime volume
settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Front ParkSense Vol.” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
will retain its last known configuration state through
ignition cycles.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be • ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
display along with a caution note to “check entire sursignal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five secMonitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears “Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchnext to setting, indicating that the setting had been screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
selected.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
the previously viewed screen appears again. When the selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings” and operating information. To make your selection, press
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
following settings will be available.
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
• Headlight Off Delay
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” butis shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
60 sec or 90 seconds.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will activate ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, been selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Unpress the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
your desired time interval.
information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
selected.
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
• Sound Horn With Lock
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection, When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Headlight Off Delay
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay
Audio
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
• Equalizer
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
• Loudness — If Equipped
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
directly on the desired setting.
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Phone/Bluetooth
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touchscreen the following settings will be available:
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Paired Phones
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Paired Audio Sources
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchthe screen or visit the provider online.
screen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
• Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip. Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
• Subscription Information
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
• Restore Settings
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or
“Cancel” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up
appears stating ⬙settings reset to default.⬙
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button version.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
Clear Personal Data
• Clear Personal Data
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For
further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement
Manual.
AUX/USB/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual
USB “Charge Only” ports.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
4
Rear USB Charging Ports
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE — IF EQUIPPED
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ precautions:
AUX/VES, etc.).
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
wiping from center to edge.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratcheach mode.
ing the disc.
Radio Operation
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular CLIMATE CONTROLS
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
display.
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Operation Button
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
3. Recirculation Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
Press and release to change the current setting, the mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
indicator illuminates when ON.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
as follows:
automatically exit Sync.
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
9. SYNC
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize control knob counterclockwise.
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort condefrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
as follows:
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Panel Mode
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
panel. Each of these outlets can be individuamount of air is directed through the defrost
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
and side window demister outlets.
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
warmer temperature settings.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
ON/OFF.
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
time.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- Climate Control Functions
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the A/C (Air Conditioning)
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
temperature settings.
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
time.
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
ON.
NOTE:
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
needed.
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
Recirculation Control
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
MAX A/C
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforselected.
Push
the button a second time to turn off the
mance.
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and paslead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
automatically maintain that comfort level.
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
not necessary to change the settings. You will experiRecirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
system to function automatically.
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
NOTE:
and then turn off.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
Automatic Operation
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Manual Operation Override
Operating Tips
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather conditrol.
tions.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winWinter Operation
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side winis not recommended because it may cause window
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
fogging.
but rainy or humid weather.
Vacation Storage
NOTE:
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatiadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Outside Air Intake
A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4A/
8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
Uconnect Voice Command
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first ceive A Text
— For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after 28.4A/8.4AN
Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
Functions.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts 3 — Push To End Call
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
4
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you? I will be <number> minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
4
iPhone Notification Setting
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
use your voice to send a text message.
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
4
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website (moparownerconnect.com).
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your 2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
vehicle and handle all of the details.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For
further
information
www.driveuconnect.com
please
visit
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and 1. To send a message, push the Phone button
the beep, say the following command: “Send mespress Link.
sage to John Smith.”
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
process your message.
your personalized music.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
NOTE:
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Setting
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
Uconnect to find.
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
use your voice to send a text message.
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
TIP:
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
, then say: “YELP search.”
push the VR button
Yelp
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice ComIf your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
mand.
use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
set reminders, and more.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from so you can still place a second call without being interincoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes rupted by incoming calls.
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- NOTE:
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPmissed calls and text messages while you were using Do
hones.
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text • Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
Do Not Disturb
and send it to voicemail.
General Information
Automatic reply messages can be:
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undetouchscreen while typing a custom message.
sired operation.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Uconnect System Support:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with • U.S. residents call 877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli• Canadian residents call 800-465-2001(English) or 800ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
387-9983(French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
device.
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci- Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
fications were met.
Sun., Closed
Additional Information
Uconnect Access Services Support 855-792-4241 Please
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .373
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .373
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 䡵 AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . .
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .370
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . .
. .383
. .383
. .384
. .384
. .385
. .385
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .399
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .399
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .404
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .392
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .392
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .417
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .420
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .441
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .430
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .431
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .432
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. .
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . .
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . .
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . .
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .447
. . . . . . .449
. . . . . . .450
. . . . . . .451
. . . . . . .451
. . . . . . .451
. . . . . . .452
. . . . . . .452
. . . . . . .453
. . . . . . .453
. . . . . . .456
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .465
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
(Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before
you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting
into any driving gear.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
(Continued)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
2.
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
OFF position.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
If Engine Fails To Start
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
(Continued)
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
the transmission in PARK.
gear selector located on the center console. The transmisThis system also locks the transmission in PARK when- sion gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the Driver Information Display
ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
(DID). To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
selector. To access the L or S position, push down on the
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift gear selector and then rotate it. You must also press the
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this secThe brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
stopped or moving at low speeds.
driving.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Standard Shifter
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Premium Shifter With AutoStick
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans- The premium transmission gear selector provides PARK,
mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick
shift control (shift paddles mounted on the steering
wheel). Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the trans- When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
mission gear, and will display the current gear in the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in brake.
this section for further information.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauGear Ranges
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
NOTE:
REVERSE (R)
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector stop.
could result.
NEUTRAL (N)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
the drivetrain.
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
The following indicator should be used to ensure that leave the vehicle.
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
WARNING!
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (if equipped; refer to AutoStick in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
rotate it fully clockwise, or push the SPORT button in the restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
center stack.
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
LOW (L) — If Equipped
indicate what actions may be necessary.
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downcan be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
following steps:
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
fully clockwise.
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enTransmission Limp Home Mode
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
Transmission function is monitored electronically for location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
1. Stop the vehicle.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
turns OFF.
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
5. Restart the engine.
can also provide you with more control during passing,
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal trailer towing, and many other situations.
operation.
Operation
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomWhen the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
recur.
DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this will
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer activate a temporary AutoStick mode. The transmission
will revert back to normal operation after a period of
service is required.
time, depending on accelerator pedal activity. When the
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
transmission gear selector is in the SPORT position,
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature tapping either shift paddle will activate ⬙permanent⬙
providing manual shift control, giving you more control AutoStick mode. The transmission will remain in
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately disables
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
AutoStick (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter • If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission gear
selector is in the SPORT position, manual gear selecAutoStick will downshift the transmission to the next
tion will be maintained until the gear selector is
lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick will retain
returned to DRIVE, or as described below. The transthe current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current
mission will not upshift automatically at redline in this
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the acceleraIn AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
tor pedal is pressed to the floor.
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would • In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to preresult. It will remain in the selected gear until another
vent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
• If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxivehicle is accelerated.
mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
depressed, the transmission will downshift when pos• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
sible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmisStarting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
sion to revert to automatic operation.
icy conditions.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+)
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ or ⬙S⬙ is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. Shifting out of SPORT mode will also
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
disable AutoStick. You can shift in or out of AutoStick
of a vehicle speed.
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the accelerator pedal.
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
WARNING!
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
provide improved throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on
the instrument panel switch bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
Sport Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission and steering systems
are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatically defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperaCAUTION!
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se- Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
lected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an the transfer case.
extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can
be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “UnderstandAcceleration
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipNOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning mespery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
and that service is required. Refer to “Driver Information
the rear (driving) wheels.
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for imsurface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause proved handling.
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/
tions should be observed:
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” or “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
– SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
Parking Brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift
lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications) this is considered normal conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Brake System Warning Light
and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
stay on for as long as four seconds.
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activacomes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
tion(s).
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not You also may experience the following when ABS acticome on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON vates:
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
• Brake pedal pulsations.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
service is required. However, the conventional brake benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braksystem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
System Warning Light” is not on.
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
WARNING!
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
repaired as soon as possible.
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will
roll down the hill as normal.
remain active.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Disabling And Enabling HSA
4. Start the engine.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
current setting, proceed as follows:
turn to the left.
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
bank below the climate control four times within
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
further information.
turn on and turn off two times.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruadditional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
ment Panel” for further information.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was comfollowing steps:
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
maintain the desired path.
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ- path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen- the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the understeer condition.
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” loThis system enhances directional control and stability of
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC coras the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Traction Control System (TCS)
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
ESC On
will turn off.
ESC Operating Modes
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momomentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
mentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
return to ESC On.
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if
• ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (If equipped) are ESC
equipped.
partial off mode(s).
NOTE:
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
WARNING! (Continued)
to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an
emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
that caused the ESC activation.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
ride.
NOTE:
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the door.
vehicle to drift left or right.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
At least once a month:
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
WARNING!
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
Snow Tires
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
If you need snow tires, select tires
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
equivalent in size and type to the origiadversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatenance schedule is highly recommended.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
WARNING!
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
You could lose control and have a collision resulting equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart exin serious injury or death.
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little this manual for more information relating to the Load
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Replacement Tires
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive
(RWD) vehicle, on P215/65R17, P225/60R18 and
P235/55R18 tires with a Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.
• Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle, P235/55R19, 235/55R19 tires with the
use of a traction device that meets the SAE type “Class
S” specification is recommended.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire
chain or traction device.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
CAUTION! (Continued)
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID)
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• TPM Telltale Light
Premium System
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
readings to the receiver module.
tires. In addition, the DID will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
and to maintain the proper pressure.
displayed.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
will automatically update, the graphic display in the DID
will change color back to the original color, and the TPM
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Service TPMS Warning
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
wheel housings.
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
not being received.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
the compact spare tire.
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnfollowing:
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a
pressure value in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed.
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and General Information
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for following two conditions:
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will (1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operain place of the pressure value.
tion.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immeby the party responsible for compliance could void the diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considThis engine is designed to meet all emis- ering service for the vehicle.
sions regulations and provide excellent 5.7L Engine — If Equipped
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoThis engine is designed to meet all emisline having an octane rating of 87 as specisions regulations and provide satisfactory
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
fuel economy and performance when us“Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gaso87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not line is recommended for optimum performance and fuel
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard economy.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
least 5 miles (8 km).
may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up. Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
When switching fuel types:
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended
that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used.
MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed
during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC engines.
Starting
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may compatible components can damage your vehicle.
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
5
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle
to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING!
Fuel Funnel
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case of an 3. Pull the release cable.
emergency:
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
Access Cover
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Month and year of manufacture
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
5
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
(Continued)
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
it is not over the GVWR.
the brakes operate.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
NOTE:
Common Towing Definitions
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and you in understanding the following information:
GAWRs.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
tire pressure.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
In this section you will find safety tips and information Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do further information.
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
and safely as possible.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
ready for operation⬙ condition.
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Max. Tongue Weight (See
Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
(Continued)
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper- • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
ating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for informabrake controller is not required.
tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
inspection procedure.
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor2,000 lbs (907 kg).
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for information
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
5
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
you can get back to cruising speed.
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The AutoStick — If Equipped
Towing Tips
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid • When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor- • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excesdriving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
provide better engine braking.
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Cooling System
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- MOTORHOME, ETC.)
heating, take the following actions:
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transacceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind anmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Highway Driving
City Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
6
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel between the center air IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
outlets.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
(Continued)
6
472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473
6
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever/gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For exPreparations For Jacking
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
when the vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
6
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
Jacking Locations
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
6
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
use, and operation.
them checked with a torque wrench by your autho8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
rized dealer or at a service station.
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
WARNING!
tightening down the fastener.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE:
6
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
lug nuts.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and engine compartment for jump-starting.
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
WARNING! (Continued)
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
6
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Manual Park Release Lever Location
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
tether strap up through the opening in the console
Park Release lever.
base.
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
Locking Tab Location
5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Tether Strap Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
6
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Front
Flatbed
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT RECOMMENDED
(but, if used, same limitations as above)
NOT RECOMMENDED
ALL
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED,
but, if used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN
position
• Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in Park)
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
for towing.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not
in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no
6
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST
be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD
vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the
ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is
unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing
is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .499
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
7
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . .526
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . .553
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .535
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .540
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp . . . . . .551
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .553
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Fluid Capacities — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS . .556
▫ Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Engine — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Engine — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
ready for testing.
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
position or start the engine. This means that your
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
fully warmed engine is shut off.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the fully warmed engine is shut off.
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
on these engines.
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
“SAFE” range on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intermanufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
API Certified engine oils.
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 enconcern for fleet customers.
gine oils.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
US Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell
Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
should not be used.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Synthetic Engine Oils
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomstation or governmental agency for advice on how and
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
your area.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
filter and are recommended.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Maintenance
mended.
Schedules” section for the proper maintenance intervals.
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
7
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Windshield Wiper Blades
Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependrating information can be found on most washer fluid
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
containers.
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of have an authorized technician inspect the complete exwasher fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
WARNING!
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
Commercially available windshield washer solvents for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
WARNING!
the washer solution.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Exhaust System
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
system.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
information.
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
(Continued)
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning Cooling System
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
WARNING!
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
tions, should be obtained immediately.
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperaTo minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damture controlled and can start at any time the igniage:
tion switch is in the ON position.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
motion.
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
vehicle.
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Coolant Checks
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rublocal authorized dealer.
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
leaks.
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but MS.90032).
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. maintenance intervals.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conformwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard tain the proper level of protection against freezing acMS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
terial Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom(−37°C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
WARNING!
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
spills immediately.
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for Points To Remember
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
a month.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezperformance, poor gas mileage, and increased emising.
sions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion maintenance intervals.
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
WARNING!
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
(Continued)
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should may adversely affect seals.
be used.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
sion damage.
front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
CAUTION!
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
Fluid And Filter Changes
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differthe factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
life of the vehicle.
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- hole.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
Fluid Changes
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
maintenance intervals.
Rear Axle
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contamiFluid Level Check
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condiaxle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. underbody protection.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detera fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
directly on the mirror.
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
WARNING!
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
11
12
13
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped
Starter
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp –
Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Cavity
14
15
16
18
19
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20
21
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
22
23
24
28
–
–
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) /
Police Bat Feed # 3
Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
Fuse – Spare
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
29
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
38
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Police)
/ Electronic Shift Module (LA)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (LD/LX)
/ Electric Power Steering Module (LD/LX) /
Fuel Pump Relay (LD/LX) / 5–Speed
Airbag Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Cavity
39
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
48
–
10 Amp Red
49
50
51
52
53
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–
Description
EPS (LA) / EHPS (Police)/AC Clutch Relay /
Vacuum Pump Relay / Fuel Pump Relay (LA)
/ Rad Fan Relays (LA)
AWD Module (LD/LX) / Front Axle Disconnect (LD/LX) / Adaptive Cruise (LA) – If
Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Opening The Access Cover
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
2
3
4
5
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
6
7
8
9
10
11
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
12
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof
Dome Lamp – Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control Module
Passenger Door Control Module
Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
Cavity
15
16
17
18
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
–
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue – LD/LX
27
–
25 Amp Clear
Description
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface – Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission Module
(LD/LX)
Amplifier – If Equipped
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
31
32
33
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
34
–
10 Amp Red
35
36
–
–
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
37
38
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
40
41
–
–
–
–
Description
Power Seats – If Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering Column
Lock (LX) – If Equipped
Steering Column Module/
Clock (LX)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve – If
Equipped
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
Cavity
42
43
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
–
Mini-Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
44
–
10 Amp Red
45
–
15 Amp Blue
46
47
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
48
49
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
Description
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering
Wheel Module (Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot /
Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Compass(LD/LX) / Humidity
Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting /
Auto High BEAM / Day
Time Running Lamps – If
Equipped
Active Suspension – SRT
Fuse – Spare
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
50
51
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
52
–
10 Amp Red
53
–
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
Description
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches – If
Equipped
HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
Adjustable Pedals – Police
Heated Washer Nozzles (LD)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
Cavity
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
25 Amp Breaker
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
68
–
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Windows (LD/LX)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR View Mirror
/ Power Outlet Illumination
(Center Console) / Police Run
Acc Relay
Dual USB Power Outlet –
R/A Sense (LD/LX) Rear
Sunshade (LD/LX)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
battery.
and should not be used for replacement.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Backup Lamp
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Rear Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Bulb Number
9005HL+
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
PSY24WSV
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF
position. Because of this, you should not attempt to 1. Open the hood.
service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
service.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise,
and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and
1. Open the hood.
install the replacement bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the head- NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn
ing and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
signal (inboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
The Rear Backup and Turn Signal Lamp use LED sources
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and that are not serviceable separately. The Rear Lamps must
be replaced as an assembly, please see your authorized
install the replacement bulb.
dealer.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into
License Lamp
the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be rehousing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
placed as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
69.9 Liters
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
10 Quarts
9.5 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent – without Severe Duty II Cooling System
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent – with Severe Duty II Cooling System
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
69.9 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.9 Liters
15 Quarts
14.3 Liters
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Engine — 3.6L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 5.7L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable,
0-15% Ethanol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE
J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT
4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR OD Synthetic Gear
Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
8
562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
oil change is necessary.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
scheduled maintenance.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serreferring to the steps described under “Driver Informavice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
tion Dispay (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
Panel” for further information.
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interquired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 concern for fleet customers.
miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563
Severe Duty All Models
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is page for the required maintenance intervals.
operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Change Indicator System:
Duty.
• Change oil and filter
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
• Check engine oil level
service
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
and park brake
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and • Inspect exhaust system
fill as needed.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle
fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . .575
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .572
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .576
9
570 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 571
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
572 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247-9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 573
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
574 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 575
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminisREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR PARTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procomplete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan- cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 577
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
9
578 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
mance.
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
580 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 391
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .176
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 61
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 97, 271
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .507
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 510
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .338, 341
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509, 510
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 509
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
INDEX 581
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 274
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
All Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383, 526
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 554
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . .329, 330, 337
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 526
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526, 556, 559
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524, 525
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 559
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Autostick
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
AWD
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 559
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 559
10
582 INDEX
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 507
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Beverage Holder Cooled (Cupholder) . . . . . . . . . . .250
Beverage Holder Heated (Cupholder) . . . . . . . . . . .250
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 559
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 522
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523, 556, 559
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272, 391
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548, 551
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 548
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 443
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
INDEX 583
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .499
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .87
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .86
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .81
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .77
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .326
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .520
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 521
10
584 INDEX
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 554, 556, 557, 558
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 534
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 503
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .33
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
INDEX 585
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 300
Driver Information Display (DID)
Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . .
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.444
.245
.259
.117
.392
.393
.404
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .535
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172, 176
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .277
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 483
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .499
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
10
586 INDEX
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 503
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 498
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .516, 556, 557, 558
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 443
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 483
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 554, 556, 557, 558
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 554
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 444
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 443
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 514
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 510
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 556, 557, 558
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 155, 294
INDEX 587
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444, 445
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 559
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 503
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .556
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 281
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 444
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439, 556, 557, 558
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 557, 558
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
10
588 INDEX
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .232, 238
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 454
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 453
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .156
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 163
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 139, 141
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 139, 141
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .156
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
INDEX 589
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 475
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 483
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .267, 274, 279, 291, 294
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Keyfob
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 367
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
10
590 INDEX
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 319 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 548
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 319 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 149
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 97, 271
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272, 391
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 156
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 281
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 551
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 163
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
INDEX 591
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .281
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .161
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 293
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 230
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548, 551
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .285, 432
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 155, 294
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .274, 294
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 452
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
10
592 INDEX
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .281, 499
Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 575
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . .439, 556, 557, 558
Oil, Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 502, 556, 557, 558
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 503
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 503
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 556, 557, 558
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
INDEX 593
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 554
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505, 554
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 576
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Paddle Shift Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .413
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .245
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
10
594 INDEX
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.420
.520
.329
.327
.325
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Rear Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
INDEX 595
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .327
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .321
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 139, 141
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
RWD
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
10
596 INDEX
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .54
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 48, 51
Seat Belt
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .54
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .56
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 132, 135, 136
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 132
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 139, 141
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 135, 136
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 97
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
INDEX 597
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 274
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . .556, 557, 558
SENTRY KEY
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 373
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 155, 294
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 424, 425, 472
Spark Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 557, 558
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 557, 558
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556, 557, 558
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 175
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .171, 172, 176
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 366
10
598 INDEX
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 167
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 167
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .327
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339, 548
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .59
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 167
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .330, 337
Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 167
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .412, 413
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 417, 423, 424, 577
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
INDEX 599
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 475, 480
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 423, 424
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 474, 475
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412, 413
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 480
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406, 417
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423, 424, 425, 472
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.426
.461
.426
.480
.406
.458
.147
.453
.489
.457
.465
.457
.465
.384
.399
.453
.465
.456
.459
10
600 INDEX
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526, 556, 559
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 524
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524, 556, 559
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 44
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 294
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .321
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 321
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 23, 33
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .34, 319
INDEX 601
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 319
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .326
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413, 450, 452
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339, 548
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .284
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 513
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 244
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
10
602 INDEX
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 163
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16C481-126-AA
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement